Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. 1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

Germany. electrical panels. and plumbing fixtures. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. such as mechanical equipment. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical. such as duct. Add basic MEP elements. and piping. fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add more detailed modelling elements. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.

You do not design entire systems. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. For example. Metric: files for users working with metric units. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. For example. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. After completing each exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. NOTE Depending on your installation. When you open a training file. Metric file names have an _m suffix. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . When you install the training files as instructed. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. is located and accessed in the training files location. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. and tags. annotations. Create schedules. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. However. to provide a richer and more finished design. views. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. On the Contents tab. Create detail views. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. when you add ductwork. such as templates and families. and sheets to document the project. templates. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. however. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you learn where the training files are located.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. your Training folder may be in a different location. So. as well as how to open and save them. you can choose to save your work.

and click the Training Files icon. and click Save. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. enter the new file name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. you are prompted to save the changes. 4 Click the training file name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. scroll down. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt and make changes. 3 In the right pane. and click Open. double-click Imperial or Metric. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. click ➤ Save As. You may close the file with or without saving changes. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. verify that Project Files (*. For File name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.rvt) is selected. a list of file types displays. and you can open any supported file type. 8 If you have made changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For Files of type. the Open dialog displays. For example. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close.

6 .

the floor or roof remains connected. In this case. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. sections. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the parameter is one of association or connection. ■ ■ 7 . quantities. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. hence. drawing sheets. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. scope. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the operation of the software is parametric. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and schedules required for a building project. You learn the terminology. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the door retains this relationship to the partition. 2D and 3D view. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. every drawing sheet. the hierarchy of elements. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. schedules. and plans. drawings.

tags. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. ducts. For example. For example. sinks. boilers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They help to describe or document the design. sinks. filled regions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Examples include detail lines. For example. ducts. tags. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. levels. and 2D detail components. and reference planes are datum elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and electrical panels. sprinklers. When you change something. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and electrical panels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. grids.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. boilers. walls and ceilings are hosts. sprinklers.

some terms are unique to Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. elevation views.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. To place levels. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Often. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. and types. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. However. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. views of the project. such as roofs. families. first floor. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. In other cases. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. for example. section views. By using a single project file. North . and ceilings. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. If you can draw. Most often. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. The project file contains all information for the building design. floors. or bottom of foundation. you can explicitly control them. and drawings of the design. and so forth). Understanding the Concepts | 9 . For example. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. from geometry to construction data. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you must be in a section or elevation view. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. top of wall. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. programming is not required. In Revit MEP.

You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. System families include ducts. A type can also be a style. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. pipes. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. showing.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. However. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. System families can be transferred between projects. and similar graphical representation. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. and wires. identical use. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. hiding. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Then experiment with them. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. such as a A0 title block. each in-place family contains only a single type. Unlike system and standard component families. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. With a few clicks. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. You can also display several project views at one time. A type can be a specific size of a family. Type: Each family can have several types. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. a lighting fixture could be considered one family.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To return the panel to the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button.

When working on the Modify tab.. select the tool first. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.. then select what you want to modify.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for editing existing elements. architect-specific tools. and settings. project and system parameters. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. data and systems. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

provides requested information. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays frequently used tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. when adding duct. closes the application menu (double-click). By default. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). To keep a panel expanded. For example. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

. select a template and create a new drawing. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Export) On the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing. click. select a file to open. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ... such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands..

publish the current project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. and Walkthrough. but is not enabled by default. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. or template file. saves a current project. (Licensing) close the file. provides views including Default 3D.. to. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. Camera.. annotation. (Print) access product and license information. To enable or disable a tool item. family. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. click. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. annotation. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Publish) print the current drawing.

Clear the Status Bar check mark. To show the Status Bar again. Starting with the most recent command. In addition. displaying the same information. To hide the Status Bar. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. check the Status Bar. When you are using a command. repeat the command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. workshared components.To undo or redo a series of operations. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. when you switch to another editing mode. This displays the command history in a list. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. However. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Group. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). or the Family Editor. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Clipboard. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Modify. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. When you are highlighting an element or component. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view.

Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). To change existing elements to a different type. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. On the Quick Access toolbar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. for example. Place a Wall.

There are several ways to access zoom options. For example. 1 Click ➤ Open.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. In the following steps. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you are familiar with these tasks. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files.

9 To display SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. If you do not have a wheel mouse. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. the view zooms in on the selected area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 6 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. on the Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Modifying the View | 19 .

➤ Options. As you move the mouse. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the SteeringWheels tab. 14 To exit the wheel. press ESC. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Click and drag to orbit the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and click tin the Options dialog. moving the wheel to the desired location. To define settings for SteeringWheels.

2 Enter ZR. referred to as shape handles. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. display along the ends. Similar controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. called drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. These are the drag controls.Design. Small blue dots. and open Level 2 . and select the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. as shown. bottoms. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.

Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. select the first item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 6 On the Undo menu. on the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. In this example. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z.

click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. In this case. 11 With the duct already selected.Some commands. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and drag it to the left as shown. such as Move and Copy. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. as shown. After selecting the element to move. you want to move the duct.

13 To end a command. 14 Enter VG. Click OK. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. such as the Modify Ducts command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Press ESC twice. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. Select Mechanical . For example. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.End a command Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Return.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

click Browse. and geometry from the starting template. under Template file. such as ducts and pipes. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and loadable families. link files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as coordination review and interference checking. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Training files. Finally. You can choose from several templates. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and click Open. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. You can either select a template from the template library. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. create and manage views. the default building levels and standard views. and open North. settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. use copy/monitor. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. In that case. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric ➤ Templates. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 6 Click OK. under Create new. you learn how to start a project from a template. New projects inherit all the families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.rte template. system families. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. such as the default project units and settings. and modify system settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 5 In the New Project dialog. 27 . The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.

you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click OK. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. (Browse). select School or University. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. ■ ■ Under Create new. click Browse. for City. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . navigate to Metric Templates. For Location. select Level 1. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. under Energy Analysis. select Manchester. If you want to use a template other than the default. NH. click (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. create another new project using the Construction template. When you select the material. select Project template. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. For example. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. review the construction materials listed.8 In the drawing area. you can select it now.rte template and click Open. 10 Using the same method. for Energy Data. In the Choose Template dialog. Click Cancel. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. Click OK twice. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. ■ For Building Construction.

Holding CTRL.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Categories. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.000 mm. power distribution systems. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 260. 290.00 mm. click Wiring.00 mm. click Rectangular. Click OK twice. select Identity Data. and fire protection systems. for 20.00 mm. for 90. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 23 In the left pane. and 140. piping. click Sizes. click Round. select Views. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. wiring. 26 In the right pane. 22 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 110. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 110. For Ground Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and click Open. and demand factors for electrical systems. and 310. under Duct Settings. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 27 Click OK.00 mm.00 mm. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. plumbing. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. for 90. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 24 In the right pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. under Duct Settings. 140. 25 In the left pane.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 33 Click OK. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

For Then by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. under Create new. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. In addition. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 4 In the New Project dialog. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. To enable this coordination. select Sub-Discipline. Click Open. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. and groups that are contained in a project. click Training. select Associated Level. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Linking Projects In this exercise. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 38 Close the file. select Auto . under Template file. select View Name.rvt. sheets. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. families. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. From the Positioning list. 5 Click OK. click Browse. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Sort by. For Then by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Family and Type.Origin to Origin.

reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 8 If necessary. Linking Projects | 31 . Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. under Constraints.Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select the linked architectural model.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Plan View types. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 19 On the left side of the view.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. click the level line for 03. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog.

click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. and that the copied elements are monitored. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. level 3. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. appears above the copied elements. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. If you modify a monitored element. select Custom. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. highlight the linked model. indicating that an element has changed. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. for the link file. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. and the level 4. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. warnings notify you of any violations. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. click Custom. 29 In the drawing area. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. After copying. click By Host View. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 27 In the drawing area. indicating that a relationship is established. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. 34 On the Basics tab. Linking Projects | 33 . 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. a warning message displays. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. and click to select the linked model.

6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 36 Click OK. 5 On the Basics tab. 3 In the View templates dialog. Click OK. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. for Name. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Planting.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. deselect Levels. Under Visibility. Under Visibility. Site. click Custom. 2 In the New View Template dialog. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Custom. deselect Parking. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. for the link file. and Topography. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. click Edit. select Custom. Click OK. Roads.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 7 Click OK twice. under View Properties. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines.

under View Templates. select Mechanical and click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. under Template file. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. they are not saved to project files or template files. click Browse. click the Graphics tab. selection default options. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. select Invert background color. 5 In the New Project dialog. 8 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Colors. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab. 9 In the Options dialog.rte. Modifying System Settings | 35 . Notice that the drawing area is black.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and click OK. 7 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. These settings control the graphics. journal cleanup options. notification preferences. and your username when using worksharing. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

When an error occurs. For Tooltip assistance. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 11 In the Color dialog.10 Under Colors. 17 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. and family libraries. 13 Under Notifications. select None. select yellow. the elements causing the error display using this color. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. and click OK. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 18 Select the wall. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select One hour. you specify default file locations. 2 In the Options dialog. click the File Locations tab. click the value for Selection color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 14 Click OK. 12 Click the General tab. 21 Close the file without saving it. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. family template files. including your default project template. However. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.

you can start a new project with that template. You can modify the existing library names and path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 10 In the Places dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. note the list of library names. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. 4 Click Cancel. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Load. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. such as in a large. TIP To view a template. and you can create new libraries. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 7 In the Options dialog. 8 Click Cancel. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. When you are opening. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. click Browse. However. or loading a Revit MEP file.3 Under Default template file. In the following illustration. click Places. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. saving. Save. select the folder to save your files to by default. and click Open. under Default path for family template files. centralized. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. ➤ New ➤ Project. Click and click Browse to select a template. click Browse.

click the My Library icon. and click (Browse). and click Open. and click OK twice.11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. Load. 15 Under Library Name. ➤ Open. click My Library. or families. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and Import dialogs. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and select it as the library path. templates. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.

22 Select My Library. 9 In the text editor. This path is determined during installation. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 12 Create a new project using the default template. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Places. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 11 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 21 On the File Locations tab. 3 Under Settings. enter sheetmtl-Cu. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If you want to relocate this path. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click the Spelling tab. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. and decal image files. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. specify the new location here. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. 5 In the text editor. If you work in a large office. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 20 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. custom color files. select Ignore words in uppercase. view the current path. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 19 Click Cancel. click OK. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 14 Click in the drawing area.

and enter 500 . 20 Under Settings. click Training Files. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Browse. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you modify snap increments. 19 In the Options dialog. under Dimension Snaps. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 21 Under Personal dictionary. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Restore Defaults.rte. under Template file. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .17 In the Spelling dialog. 22 In the text editor. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Close. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. work with snapping turned off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Edit. 23 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 4 In the New Project dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click OK. you modify snap settings. 25 Close the file without saving it. click the Spelling tab.

and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. deselect Chain. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. If it does not. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. enter SM. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom out until it does so. and move the cursor to the right. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. use the wheel button on your mouse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. TIP To zoom while sketching. While sketching. For example. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm.

15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. with or without saving it. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. it will snap to the endpoints. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Do not set the wall end point. 25 Click OK. and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Close the file. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and move the cursor to the right.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and specify the wall endpoint.. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 19 Enter SM. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. the midpoint.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

you will understand the process. 45 . you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. In this lesson. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. At the end of the tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. However. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. and then you create a plenum level. As you create the mechanical system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. After applying a color scheme to the zones.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This system consists of a cooling tower. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you first plan the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. methodology.autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you first configure the linked architectural model. go to http://www. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. By following the recommended workflow. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. These components are defined in the architectural training file. roof. and double-click West . NOTE When working with a linked file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Room Bounding. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Constraints. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a level for plenums. ceilings. and after the linked model highlights. In this section. Next.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it.MEP. not in the MEP training file. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. and click OK. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 6 In the Project Browser.

A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 9 On the Draw panel. The new level is placed. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Esc.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click Properties. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. Click Plan View Types. For Offset. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. enter 2600mm. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and in the Plan View Types dialog. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.

and for Offset. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Plenum. select Design. for Default View Template. In the next exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. NOTE After finishing each exercise. In this exercise. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. In this exercise. select Level Above (Level 3). for Level. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for View Range.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plenum Plan. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Under Identity Data. For View Classification. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. for View Scale.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and then place spaces in various types of areas. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. For Cut plane. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. ■ Click OK twice. Under Extents. enter 0. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. However. enter an Offset of 300mm. Under View Depth. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select MEP . For Sub-Discipline. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . for Top. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. click Edit.

6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. walls. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. select Horizontal. Placing Spaces | 49 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select New.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Upper Limit. For (Tag Location). For Space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 2 Plenum. click Training Files. and ceilings). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. For Offset.

The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter Library. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.7 Click to place the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Number. 9 Select the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name. 14 In the drawing area. ensuring coordination between the files.

select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Modify. 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. For Offset. For Upper Limit.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Spaces | 51 . 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.

23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.

rvt. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. for Upper Limit. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. and for Offset. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 3. and then press Esc. enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

and change the space number to 216A. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click in the number column. click in the name column. 9 In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 In the Project Browser. and select Corridor.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 15 Press Esc twice.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. as shown. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.

16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. If necessary.

7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. In the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Upper Limit. select the space. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click OK. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. On the Options Bar. expand Spaces. select Roof Level.4 Press Esc. 6 Enter VG. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. select Interior and Reference. 12 Click in the section view. enter 0. For Offset. right-click. 10 In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click in the chase area to place the space. and click Element Properties.

under Loaded Tags. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 15 Press Esc. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.Space Plan. ceilings. enter 225PC. 17 Type ZF. floors. for Name. and click OK.■ For Limit Offset. Bounding elements (such as walls. and maximize the view. Under Identity Data. For Number. enter Chase. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 1200. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.

click Training Files. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. which removes the space from the Default zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To display space reference lines. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted.20 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. it is automatically added to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click View ➤ Zones. In the next exercises. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.

and a new zone is created. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.rvt. select Occupiable. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and click OK. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. The Zone tool is active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that it’s the active view. and verify the zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. To display space reference lines. As you do this. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. double-click 121 Cafeteria. ) or 5 In the System Browser. under Energy Analysis. under Spaces.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Next. indicating that the space is occupiable. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The graphic in the System Browser updates. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Using the Edit Zone tab. Click OK. Expand HVAC Zones. and click Finish Editing Zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. To view the zone in the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). type VG. Instruction 221.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. 4 In the drawing area. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and modify the zone properties. Instruction.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning. enter 2 .rvt. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. under Identity Data. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. To display space reference lines. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. click Reference.West . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. for Name.Zoning is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. expand 2 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 In the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 11 Close the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Area B. click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the Level 1 . and verify the zone in the System Browser. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.West . and click OK. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.

Verify that the distance is 12mm.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 15 Press Esc. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. click in the Level 2 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. Select Attached End. 8 In the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 9 With the Add Space tool active. zoom out.Zoning view.

Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.East. Front. space. and zone information. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and select 109 Lounge.rvt. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. verify that Wireframe is selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. enter Lounge . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane).Zoning to make it the active view. for Name Value. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. on the ViewCube. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. double-click the zone tag. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. In this exercise. click the corner where the Top. you verify the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1 . and click OK. click Training Files. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .

All spaces in the zone display in isolation. select 1_South_Area C. ■ ■ On the Details tab. click (Isolate).The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Using the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. ■ Click (Highlight). With 109 Lounge selected. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. you isolate the space.

10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. ■ ■ ■ Next. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. heating air temperature. and humidification set point. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click (Shading). View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. the space information displays for the selected space. This indicates the outdoor air per person. cooling air temperature. Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Heating Information. verify that 23. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. select 109 Lounge. This indicates the heating set point.11 °C : 32.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. For Electrical Loads. outdoor air per area. verify that 21. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This indicates the cooling set point. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and air changes per hour. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. scroll down in the left pane. For Construction Type. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. click . verify that <Building> is selected. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . and then click OK. and then click OK.22 °C : N/A is specified.33 °C : 12.22 °C : N/A is specified. For People. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. click . For Cooling Information. Next. and dehumidification set point. select Lounge/Recreation. and in the People dialog. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. Below the list of spaces and zones.

15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and other room-bounding components.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 12 Using the methods learned previously. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. floors. select Level 3. roofs. click Cancel. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. enter 0. For Offset. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. open MEP . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.

it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and zone information. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. select Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. for Number. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. and select space Plenum 212P. Under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. you verified building. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 212P. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. and verify that the space has replaced the void.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. On the Place tab. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. under Volume Computations. click Training Files. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Sliver Space Tolerance. is selected. For Postal Code. Click OK twice. and click OK. For Building Construction. For Export Complexity. verify that Level 1 is selected. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. double-click Level 2 . and click OK. for City. select space Library 219. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . verify that New Construction is selected. this option adjusts the times automatically. you need to select this option. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. click in the Value field. For Ground Plane. 8 In the drawing area. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Project Phase. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. click Edit. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Energy Analysis. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. On the Weather tab. select School or University. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).Space Plan. For Location. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. for Energy Data.rvt. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. If. In order to select a space. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that 300 is specified. NH. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Manchester. verify that <Building> is specified. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. enter 03101. for Building Service. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected.

For Space Type. is specified. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Latent. Click OK twice. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Building Construction. verify that Manchester. for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 45 W. enter 60 W. select Specified. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and then click . NH. for Values. For People.Audio Visual. You have verified the building information. For Condition Type. select Library . Under Power. for Values. 12 Click the Details tab. for Values. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Location. select Heated and cooled. Select the space associated with the warning. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. click in the Value column. select Specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. For Building Service. verify that Occupiable is selected. click Edit. click Edit. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. and click OK. Select Area per person. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that <Building> is specified. select Actual. verify that School or University is selected. m. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Next. Click OK. For Sensible. and enter 15 sq. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . it should be corrected before you calculate loads. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. or neither. both.

You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 17 In the loads report. weather. and zone information for the building model. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .11°C. or make any changes to the model. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. space. 19 In the drawing area. In this exercise. 21 Click OK. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. You should correct the space error in the building model. and a loads report displays. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Calculate. and under Heating Information. or zone information. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. There should be no warnings displayed. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. click Information). 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and click OK.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. space. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 15 Review the loads report for project. and can be modified here. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. under Energy Analysis. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 16 After you review the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. select 219 Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. verify that Heating Set Point is 21.Space Plan.

2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the drawing area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. indicating that it’s the active view. click to the right of the building to place the legend. click Training Files. in relatively small increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range.rvt. 5 Zoom in to the legend.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Zones. Click OK. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts.

under Schemes. The new scheme displays in the view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select Cooling Load . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. select the color scheme legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.Expanded Ranges. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.rvt.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Using the method learned previously. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. In the next exercise.

enter . In the Fields dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.Space Fill is the active view. Select Schedule building components. and click OK. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Formula. For Name. enter Space Airflow Schedule. select HVAC. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Air Flow. In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Airflow Delta. for Formula. for Select available fields from.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the Calculated Value dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Under Available fields. For Discipline. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Click OK. more category options are available. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select New Construction. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Formula. select Spaces. and then click . click (Browse). For Type. select Spaces. ■ Click Calculated Value.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Phase. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. Click OK twice. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and Blank line. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. right-click to access schedule properties. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Background Color. select Airflow Delta. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. For Then by. click the color swatch. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. select Number. and then click Conditional Format. and then select Hidden field. select Level. For Fields. Under Conditions to Use. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select red. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. verify that Show is highlighted. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Level. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and click OK. Header. select Not Between. ■ The schedule displays. In the Color dialog. For Value. Select Ascending. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s.

you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In the next lesson. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In later exercises. In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.

you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 .Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. you will create supply air systems. After system creation. and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and scroll to space 223.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 3 In the ceiling view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

select the diffuser. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 17 Move the cursor down. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. type 3600. Also. click Place on Face. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. enter 215 L/s. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and press Enter. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and select M_Supply Diffuser . and then press Esc to end the command. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. for Flow.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. If the host element is modified or moved. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 15 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Placement panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

select one of the diffusers. and click Open. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Next. click Place on Face.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 25 In the drawing area. as shown. 28 On the Placement tab. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and then press Esc.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.rfa. click Yes. 22 In the drawing area. 29 Place 2 diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. clear Leader. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 24 In the Open dialog.

31 In the alert dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. under Other. Level. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. and click to select the lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select one of the return diffusers. for Reference. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Yes. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select the vertical grid line as shown. as shown. 43 Using the same method. and then press Esc twice.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . align the other return diffuser. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 40 In the drawing area. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog.

you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals.44 While pressing Ctrl. and press Enter. enter 310 L/s. and click OK. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear LeftArrow. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. select both return diffusers. under Mechanical. right-click. 47 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and click Element Properties.

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Supply Diffuser . 9 On the Options Bar. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Design to make it the active view. 8 In the Type Selector.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 10 In the drawing area. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. at the lower left corner of the building.rvt. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Scale. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the space crossing lines display.200 Neck. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. expand HVAC . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and double-click Level 1 . click 1 : 100. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Airflow. enter 2400. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. enter 170 L/s. By copying the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. 11 Select the diffuser. Click OK. under Constraints. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. move the cursor down. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. As a result.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. type 6000. Under Mechanical . 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. for Offset. for Flow. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Also. 15 Press Esc. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Enter. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.

select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. 18 On the Options Bar.16 Using the same method. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader.

click Edit. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. it is a negative value. 26 Using the method learned previously. under Available Fields.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Type. Mark. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select Mark. 29 Using the same method. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. under Other. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. enter 210 L/s. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Next. select Air Terminals. 27 In the schedule. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. under space 115. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK 3 times. for Sort by. double-click System Type. and press Enter. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and click View Properties. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. tile the windows. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . for Flow. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. type. for Embedded Schedule. select 21. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. mark. and then right-click in the schedule. For Category. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. and Flow.

select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. 31 In the drawing area.Design. and maximize Level 1 . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. as shown. As you highlight the zone.

Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.43 W (approximately 1.High Efficiency . select M_WSHP . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .3 times the heating load). and under Energy Analysis. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 33 Click OK.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 36 In the drawing area.7-18 kW .Horizontal .

right-click the title. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. When you highlight a space. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and click View ➤ Systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . After creating the logical connection. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. including energy analysis. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. enter . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.Design is highlighted. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Plan . As you add diffusers to systems. You then create the logical connection between the system components. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 6 Keep the System Browser open. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.rvt. the space crossing lines display. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. However. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. indicating that it’s the active view.

15 Click Cancel. review the Number of Elements. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. System Name. 18 Click OK. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Connect Into. the air terminals are the children. 17 Using the method learned previously. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Flow value.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and the system connects them. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). the number of elements is updated. On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 11 In the drawing area. 12 In the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool.

23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.rvt. under Mechanical. for System Name. for Mark. 25 Click OK. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.Rename the system Next. under Identity Data. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. In this exercise. click Training Files.

select Flex Duct Round : Flex . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 3000. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In this case. 4 In the drawing area. For Flex Duct Type. the Network type provides several solutions. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. A Generate Layout tab displays. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Select Branch. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Also. select Network. and display solution 1. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.HVAC Plan. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. for Solution Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.Round. the space crossing lines display. For Offset. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. enter 3000. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. For Duct Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Settings. For Offset. which provides various layout tools.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. select the upper left diffuser.Design is highlighted.

96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 9 On the Generate Layout panel. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Click OK. as is the elbow itself. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. Either relocate the system components. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. as shown. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. 11 Click Finish Layout.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Modify. or manually modify the duct. enter 900. you’ll get an error in a later step. For example. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.

NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Color Scheme. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. The first time you press Tab. and click OK. and equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. highlight a segment of the main duct.Flow. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. a disconnection exists. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and click to select it. Usually. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. If the entire network does not highlight. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. fittings. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.

and then click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Values Displayed. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). under Mechanical . select one of the diffusers in the system. 20 In the drawing area. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. but not all values are used in this view. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. under Graphics.Airflow. and press Enter. select By View. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. and click OK. select the WSHP. for Flow. and on the Options Bar. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.

29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Branch Sizing. and drag it to the right. Select Restrict Height. select the color scheme legend. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Under Constraints. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Schemes.Velocity. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 26 Click OK. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Calculated Size Only. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and then press Esc to clear the selection. click Cancel. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Duct Color Fill . Select the upper segment of main duct. Select Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and then click to select it. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and enter . Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and select 400. Click OK. select Friction.65 Pa/m. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). highlight a segment of the duct. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. static pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. pressure. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.The ductwork and fittings are updated. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.

You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and select the WSHP. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct.

15 On the ViewCube. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. and click Draw Duct. Front. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . select the top right diffuser. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. right-click the connector grip.3D MEP.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top. NOTE When drawing duct. 11 On the Options Bar. enter 3000. 14 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. for Offset. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115.

24 Select the remaining diffusers.22 Using the same method. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click OK. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Airflow. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Mechanical . verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Constraints. select a segment of the main duct. and click OK. for Flow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 40 Using the same method. and click to select it. clear Restrict Height. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. such as a plenum. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

108 .

Automatically and manually lay out piping. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. In this lesson. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. including 2 base mounted pumps. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. on level 3 of the building model. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. 109 . or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment.

rvt. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Horizontal High Efficiency . click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. in corridor 328.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Left Return . and select M_WSHP .7-18kW .

10 Select the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 8 Click the corridor wall face. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown. verify that Wall faces is selected. and enter 600. click the top edge of the WSHP. click the dimension. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. select the 2 WSHPs. and in the Type Selector. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.) 14 Click Modify.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. as shown. enter 2750. 21 Click Modify.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK.75 L/s. Under Mechanical. for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 0. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create the logical connection between the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. but without a corresponding system. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. including flow and pressure. you create the return and supply piping systems. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. Therefore. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Assigning a system component to an existing system. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.rvt. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. where it is easier to review the information. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 5 In the System Browser. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. As you assign equipment to systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the 2 WSHPs. This display indicates that the system is selected. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Creating a Piping System | 115 . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.Mech 330). and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. right-click the Systems column heading.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. while pressing Ctrl. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.

11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. You have created the hydronic return system. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. select the boiler. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 17 On the Options Bar. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Notice that on the Options Bar. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Editing System.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. for System Name. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click OK. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. In heating mode. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view.HVAC Plan . and bypasses the cooling tower. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower. 25 Select the boiler. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Roof . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. In cooling mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Creating a Piping System | 117 .18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. You also manually modify the layout path as required. you can view several parameters. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 0. 29 Right-click CHWS. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click Select. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click Column Settings. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.8. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. indicating the logical connection. In the System Browser. under Mechanical. expand Piping. and click Expand All. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click Properties. 32 In the System Browser. for Water Flow. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool.

rvt. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. then the Select a System dialog displays. you can place the cursor over a system component. click Training Files. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Design is highlighted.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When you draw a box to select components. indicating that it’s the active view. select Mechanical Equipment. and click to select it. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the system. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. A system preview displays in red. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the boiler. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Mech 330).HVAC Plan . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.

select Perimeter. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. It does not reference the architecture. verify that Solutions is selected. click Settings. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. enter 450. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. select CHWR. 13 Click Cancel. 11 On the Options Bar. duct. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.9 In the Select a System dialog. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. or architectural components. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 19 In the drawing area. With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the flow for each WSHP is 0.75 L/s. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 17 Optionally. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines.

24 Press Esc.50 L/s. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 1. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 1.75 L/s). 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and access its instance properties. and click OK. and click OK.50 L/s.

28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System. Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. On the Options Bar. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Number of Elements is now 8. double-click Level 1 .Design.

34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 38 Using the same method. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . note that the value for Flow is 4.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. access its instance properties.50 L/s. as shown. you physically close the CHWR loop. so the total flow of 6. which propagates flow throughout the system. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.44 L/s.94 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. Next.94 L/s. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. and click Cancel. under Mechanical. 35 Using the drag control.

enter 0. select CHWS.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .00%. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 41 Click OK. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). For Inset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then click OK. Click Settings. select a WSHP. enter 450. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.

select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.

51 Click Finish Layout. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. or manually modify the pipe. To create the piping system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. as shown. select a different layout solution.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 50 Using the same method. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).

Design is highlighted. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . As you work in the training file. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. and the return pipes are magenta. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. double-click 3D Building.

as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. and press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

The connections are automatically created. select the boiler. select the return pipe riser. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 13 In the plan view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.11 In the Select Connector dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 12 In the 3D view. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and the lower one is secondary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click Draw Pipe. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 600. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 381. and you select 1 connector.In a plan view. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and click OK. 18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 19 In the plan view.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. and select it. and click Draw Pipe. and click the minus symbol.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. as shown. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

click to connect to the pump. and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. 29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. enter 1200. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.28 Press Esc.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc.

as shown. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe.

■ Move the cursor down. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . type 300. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Next. you validate the flow through the system.

right-click. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. view the properties for the secondary pump. Connect the cooling tower Next. 40 Click Cancel. the value is 0 L/s. 44 In the 3D view. notice that under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. and click OK. 46 Press Esc. which is rounded up to 3. notice that Flow is 6. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.44 L/s. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . When you create the pumps in parallel. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. 42 Click OK. select the cooling tower. 43 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. 41 Using the same method. In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s).

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .44 L/s. 49 Press Esc. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. select the cooling tower.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. and is heated by the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. When the valve is open. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). the water bypasses the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.52 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted.

5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. and select M_Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 .

place another M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.

validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 6. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).44 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adding Valves | 147 . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method. and click OK. and click Element Properties. verify that Flow is 0 L/s.

In heating mode. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and select M_Ball Valve . and select M_Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). In the left pane of the Open dialog.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .44 L/s. click Training Files. validate that the Flow is 6. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 22 Using the method you just learned.44 L/s.rvt. Initially. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.

4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.HVAC Plan . and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Design is highlighted. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. indicating that it’s the active view.Flow.Size.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Sizing Pipe | 149 . as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.

Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. enter 1. and for Velocity. Under Constraints. select Friction. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. or manually modify the pipe. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 13 Press Esc. Click OK. and click to select the branch. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Select And. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect.5 m/s. select a different layout solution. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and enter 220 Pa/m. for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.rvt. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and double-click 3D Building. Using the System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System In this exercise. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. click Training Files. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System | 151 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .14 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

flow. as required. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). as shown.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. An inspection flag reports the section number. This information helps you modify the system design. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and pressure information including pressure loss.

Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Static Pressure is 41916. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. you need to validate them. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 10 Click Finish. In this exercise.0 L/s.Design. and to size pipe. and click OK. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. In the left pane of the Open dialog.7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Warnings display. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.rvt.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Note that the Flow is 1.HVAC Plan . 9 Using the same method. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. select 32° C. targeting those systems that need attention. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.4 Pa. and double-click Level 3 . inspect Section 6 again. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.1 Pa.

This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and click View. right-click Hydronic Return. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design floor plan. After you assign components to a system.Design.HVAC Plan . and click Expand All. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 12 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. As you learned when placing components. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. double-click Level 1 . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and select Level 3 . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 7 In the System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the Systems titlebar. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and for pipe sizing. and confirm unassigned system components. For example. and click Show to view all of the system components. In the System Browser. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. otherwise. 4 In the System Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. click Close.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. After you have assigned all components to systems. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). TIP If you have multiple views open. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. thus assigning the components to a system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 10 Using the same methods.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Using the methods that you learned. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting.

For Material. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. wiring. You also add a wiring type. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.04. Select Correction Factor. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter THHN. For Temperature. select 90.rvt. distribution systems. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select Wiring Types. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ Click New Correction Factor. enter 70. click Training Files. expand Wiring . As you place components and create circuits. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. speeding up the design phase. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select Copper. For Factor. enter 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Copper. In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ ■ For Material. click (Open). Click OK.Wire Sizes. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages.

enter 250. Click OK. select 3. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select THHN. For Conduit Type. enter 240. select Single. select 240. enter 220. By specifying a range. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Wires. For Neutral Multiplier. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select Voltage Definitions. For L-L Voltage. select Demand Factors. select 75. enter 120/240. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Click Split. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 1. For Phase. select 10000 VA. For Max Size. Select Neutral Required.0. select Distribution Systems. select Hot Conductor Size. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For L-G Voltage. enter 50. enter 240. For Insulation. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select 120. For Neutral Size. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . For Minimum. select Power. Under More Than. select Steel. For Maximum.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. enter 2000. For Value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Lighting Plan. enter Required Lighting Level. click (Open). click Add. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting group in the space element properties.Lighting. and double-click Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical . For Discipline. Verify that Instance is selected. and conference rooms. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Illuminance. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Under Categories. In the left pane of the Open dialog. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. under the Electrical . click Training Files. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. such as offices. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Electrical. For Type of Parameter. Click OK twice. select Spaces. 5 In the drawing area. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. In this case the key style is the type of space and. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. For Group Parameter Under. Later in the tutorial. restrooms.

Select Schedule Keys. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. enter Lighting Levels. enter Open Office. double-click Required Lighting Level. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. For Name. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical . Click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. select Spaces. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. under Available Fields. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . and for Key Name.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting. and click OK. enter 485. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Click OK. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column.

You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. 22 Using the same method. which is mapped to project units.Lighting Plan. click Edit. change the sort order back to the default setting. Notice that as you enter the data. for Sorting/Grouping.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 21 Click OK twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. select Required Lighting Level. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Select Blank Line. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. 27 Click OK. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. In this exercise. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Later in this exercise.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. that Required Lighting Level is blank. for Lighting Levels. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. the value input applies only to the selected space. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . click (Open). Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. under Identity Data.

For Color. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. select Required Lighting Level. and press ENTER. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. verify the By Range is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. then the new value will be 400 lx.00.00 lx. for Category. Select the scheme for At Least 20. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. Under Schemes. select Spaces. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog.00. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.rvt. for Title. and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 450. and press Enter. ■ Click OK. and click (Add Value) five times. and click (Add Value). 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. enter 800. click (Duplicate).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Select the scheme for 500 lx. enter 900. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Add Value) again. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. for Name. enter Required Lighting Levels. click Training Files. and in the At Least column. enter 200. For example.00 lx. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. 00 lx still selected.00 lx.

select Electrical. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. Name.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Illuminance. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Required Lighting. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.Lighting CF.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Level. For Color Scheme. enter Lighting Delta. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. For Name. select Spaces. For Discipline. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 8 In the drawing area. for Available Fields. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. and double-click Level 2 . double-click Number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Average Estimated Illumination. 13 Click Calculated Value. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Spaces. and Required Lighting Level. For Type. Click OK.

click Browse. for Fields. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Not Between. Click OK. press the spacebar. for Sort by. Select Header. select Average Estimated Illumination. and click Browse. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. select Required Lighting Level. select Level. Select Blank Line. Click OK three times. For Value. for Test.■ For Formula. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. On the Formatting tab. select Red. Click OK twice. under Condition. type a hyphen. Click Conditional Format. Click Background Color. for Formula. for Custom Colors. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.

16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. 171 . Create power loads. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. power circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. as you place lighting fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design. Then. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. First. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.

■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 7 In the Project Browser. In the Color dialog. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Orange. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click (Open). Under Scheme Definition. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. By using orange as the color for this range. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m.Lighting Ceiling plan. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. click Training Files. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.rvt.Lighting CF view is open. for Basic Colors.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. You can create additional color schemes. select the color legend. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select Average Estimated Illumination. for the Spaces Category. Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 8 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. zoom to space Library 219. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 13 Click the Level 2 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.

18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.5 fc range. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277V. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) .the +/. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range is satisfied. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

for Name enter and click OK. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.00 VA. enter 162. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. for Apparent Load. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

■ Click OK twice. specify 15000. select Luminous Flux. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 183 . for Color Preset. junction boxes. 9 In space Library 219. Under Photometrics.rvt. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Under Electrical. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.93. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. click the value for Initial Intensity. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter F15. click the value for Initial Color. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click the value for Light Loss Factor. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Type Mark. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. select Xenon and click OK. ■ Click Apply. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. enter . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. select T5 [HO]. you add switches. 2 In the drawing area. Placing Switches. select the top center fixture. In the Select File dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. click (Open). click Training Files. enter . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Click OK. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. for Lamp. select 463T5_S. Under Photometrics. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Ballast Loss Factor.85. Under Photometrics.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog.ies and click Open. Junction Boxes. and receptacles to your design. Junction Boxes. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. In the next exercise. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. and click OK.00 lm.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V.

Select M_Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.rfa and click Open.NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and Receptacles | 185 . The element type M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Junction Boxes.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 15 Select the junction box. enter JB-1NL. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note the Number of Poles is 1. Under Electrical. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.14 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK twice. zoom to space Library 219. NOTE When entering values. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Mark. enter 2750. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 21 In the drawing area. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Level 2 . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click Edit Type. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Offset. In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

24 For any column. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. right-click and click Column Settings. NOTE If necessary. 23 In the System Browser. Click OK. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Voltage. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Placing Switches. Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Number of Elements. Junction Boxes. 26 In the System Browser. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Expand General. Space Name. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Size. Expand Electrical. and Receptacles | 187 . Distribution System.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

and Receptacles | 189 . 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. move the cursor along the wall.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and Receptacles | 191 . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and work toward the higher voltage. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .208V MCB . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. Adding wiring to a project is optional.rvt.equipment.Surface: 100A. zoom to the space Electrical 220. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.

enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK.480V MCB . For Panel Name. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . #1 Pole Breakers. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. enter LP-2B.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter PP-2B. for Distribution System. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. #1 Pole Breakers. enter 20. for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name.Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. 9 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . click Check None.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

click Training Files.Loads.39 Using the same method. 2 In the drawing area. except without wire. click Check None. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Hot Conductors. select Wires. Click OK.rvt. 42 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and create permanent wiring. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 2. and for Category. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). Next you create circuits without showing wire. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Distribution System. 13 In the System Browser. expand Power. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Rating. and then expand circuit 1. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and Voltage Drop are selected. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and verify that Load. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Voltage. Expand Electrical. Click OK. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. change the Voltage to 277V. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 22 With the junction box still selected. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Click Tags. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. under Electrical. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 30 Close the System Browser.

under Identity Data.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. Click Yes. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Type Mark. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 47 In the drawing area. 40 Click OK twice. click below the first one to place it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. select Break. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. enter FR4. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 39 In the Type Properties dialog.

select Lighting Fixture Tags. 52 In the Save As dialog.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None. click Training Files. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 54 Select all of the tags. enter a comma. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Next you create a switch system. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. and for Category. 57 In the Filter dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down.rfa. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. click (Open). 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. and click Apply. for File Name. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click Save. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area.

8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. under Electrical Lighting. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter a. Click OK. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. for Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.

17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. enter b. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. for switch ID.Lighting. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.

Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Electrical Fixtures. click Check None. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 7 In space Electrical 220. and data systems. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click Training Files.26 Close the file with or without saving it. lighting. and for Category. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 2 In the drawing area.Loads. Circuits are used for power. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Creating Power Loads | 207 . enter 2. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 4 In the Filter dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click (Open). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. Click OK. select the PP-2B panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and click Element Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.

and in the drawing area. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click to select the circuit.rfa. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.13 Select the wire again. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. and in the right pane. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.

click the connector of the first receptacle. 26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 209 . and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area.

There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

3 In the Electrical space. 6 Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Had there been a greater imbalance. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected.rvt. Scroll down. Under Electrical-Loads. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. zoom to space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 1-#12. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. the distribution is shifted. 1-#10. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . After re-balancing loads. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. enter 30A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 1-#10. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click Rebalance Loads. select panel LP-2B. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. for Rating. 1-#12. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Finally. Click OK.

19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 40A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and click OK. for Rating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. select the transformer TP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click Finish Editing Circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Loads. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 24 Click Select Panel. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 14 Close the warning dialog. for Rating. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click OK. 12 Select panel PP-2B. under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. under Electrical . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 25A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.

drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Body Text. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . and open E601 . 6 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. for Font. for Appearance. The Panel Schedule Report displays. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise.Panel Schedules. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. Select PP-2B. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font Size. under Other. enter 5 mm.rvt. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 5 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. select Bold and Italic. enter 4 mm. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 4 Close the report. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. expand Sheets (all). under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. click (Open). 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click OK twice. click Edit.

click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. press TAB once.rvt. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. select space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. click (Open). each with a load of 180VA. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Expand Unassigned. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.

21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 Close the details dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. In the System Browser. select MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

right-click PVC . and click Properties. in addition to loading existing families. type PVC .Plumbing Plan . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Vent.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Adding a pipe size. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. 219 .rvt.Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK. 4 In the Name dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this exercise. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Design is open. click Duplicate. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you create a PVC pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.

006 mm. In the Project Browser.DWV: Standard. 25 For Outside.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. and open Metric\M_Trap P . and click Main.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Tee. under Mechanical.Sch 40 . 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC . select Sanitary. For Offset. enter 45. for Nominal. 21 In the right pane. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select None. select Branch.DWV. 6 Click OK. enter 46.000 mm.PVC . PVC . 22 Click New Size. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 18 For System Type. enter 54. 27 For the new pipe size. select Plastic. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.DWV: Standard. select Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Training Files.PVC . under Pipe Types. 17 In the left pane. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click Pipe Settings. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 10°. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 26 Click OK. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Vent is listed. 13 In the right panel. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.293 mm. 15 For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 On the Selection panel. Cross. and click OK. for Material. select M_Tee Sanitary . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Tap. select Sanitary. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.rfa.Sch 40 . enter -1250. click Modify. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.

including plumbing fixtures. add a hot water heater. 221 . and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the cold water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent. sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

a toilet. The base is placed. for example. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. A preview of the piping layout displays. select Sanitary 107. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view.

230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Sanitary. You accept this suggested solution. and click OK. and click Settings. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -350 mm. 30 Click Modify. click Solutions. for Slope. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select Main. enter 1. The default settings are automatically modified. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 29 On the Options Bar. select Branch. enter -350 mm. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and for Offset. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter -1225. select PVC . 23 For Pipe Type. for Diameter. 21 On Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. select PVC . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 26 For Pipe Type. 24 For Offset.Sanitary. 25 In the left pane. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.19 On the Options Bar. select 100 mm. 27 For Offset. select Intersections.05%. and modify it to meet project requirements. for Solution Type. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 34 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.33 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.36 Using the previous method.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Overall. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .

adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Public. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).rvt. and verify that Level 1 . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Plumbing Plan . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under M_Lavatory . in the Type Selector. select 560 mmx560 mm . as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. click Training Files.Rectangular. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Design is open. 4 On the Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

8 Select the sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. enter 711.7 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .2. and press Enter to create a second sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .2. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

16 On the Edit System panel. 21 Select the tee. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Overall. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the System Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. use the ViewCube to orient the view. double-click 3D Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish Editing System. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . 19 In the 3D view.

for Slope. and click Apply. 27 Click Modify. with the tee fitting selected. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.22 In the plan view.05%. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 760 mm. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. press Spacebar. for Offset. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. When you press the Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1. and click Draw Pipe.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV. and when the vertical center line displays.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC . select Standard. 30 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 305 mm. and click Draw Pipe. 36 In the section view. for Offset. right-click the right connector. on the Options Bar. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.33 With the fitting selected. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 37 Select the fitting. 34 Press Esc. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. In the next steps. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. zoom in to the double wye fitting.

42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 46 In the section view. 48 Click Modify. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc. enter 150 mm. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. 49 Using the same method. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

DWV. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. 55 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. under M_Trap P . select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left. 51 In the Type Selector. 53 Using the same method. 52 In the plan view. 54 Click Modify.PVC .

select the left P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click in the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify. Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. enter 150 mm.. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe.

Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. as shown. under Pipe Types. select PVC Sanitary. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .■ In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. In the Type Selector. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc.

05% is selected. and verify the slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 62 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Finish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. for Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Sch 40 . 7 On the Selection panel. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. 10 In the 3D view.Floor level line.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.PVC . and click to draw the pipe. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click Draw Pipe. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click the intersection to place the fitting. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select the vertical stack.Design. as shown. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the Section view.Overall. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard.DWV.Plumbing Plan . right-click the top connector. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise. In this tutorial. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this lesson. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 2 Right-click Standard. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.rvt. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. click Training Files. go to http://www. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. However. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and click Duplicate. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You create a new pipe type.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 .

and click Properties. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Pipe Type. select Carbon Steel. For Offset. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you create project parameters and work with schedules. For System Type. In the next exercise. select Main. structural beams. 9 Click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. under Mechanical. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. for Material. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and enter Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. However. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Next. In this exercise. For System Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. verify that 2800 is selected. duct. or architectural components. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. click Rename. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and then click OK. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. you modify the type properties of the pipe. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. verify that 2800 is specified. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type.

rvt. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. for Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . right-click. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Zone 1. 5 Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. for Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. click Add. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select the upper half of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone. 8 Using a crossing window. Under Categories. click Training Files. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select Spaces. For Group parameter under.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. and click Element Properties. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.

under Fire Protection. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. select Zone 1. and then access instance properties. and click OK.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. enter Zone 2. to which you add various parameters. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. including a calculated value parameter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. click Training Files. 13 Using the same method. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

double-click on each column separator. and on the ribbon. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Click OK. For Key name. 9 On the Formatting tab. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The schedule displays. for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and click Field Format. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. Obstructed-Combustible. For Type of Parameter.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select 0 decimal places. click Add Parameter. 14 Select the new header. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Maximum Spacing. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Light. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK. select Spaces. Select Schedule keys. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Fire Protection. 6 Using the same method. click the Formatting tab. 11 Click OK twice. For Rounding. For Units. For Name. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select mm. For Unit symbol. Click OK. For Group parameter under. indicating that it’s the active view. select Length. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Protection Area Construction Type.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Millimeters. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.

Unobstructed Extra. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter 40. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter 4575. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name. Unobstructed Ordinary. Click OK. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 16 Using the same method. and press Enter.

Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). enter Minimum Sprinklers. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Type. For Units. 20 On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Number. For Discipline. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Common. select Area. under Available fields. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Rounding. select Fixed.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select 0 decimal place. In the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. click . and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Formula. and click OK. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. 22 Click OK twice. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK.

26 Click OK 3 times. and then click Field Format. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. click Edit. select Number. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Under Field formatting. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. At the bottom of the dialog. For Fields. for Sort by. select Sprinkler Zone. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Header and Blank line. For Then by (second instance). Select Header and Blank line. For Then by. For Fields. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sorting/Grouping. and click View Properties. select Hidden field. select Grand totals. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. and then select Hidden field. and select Totals only. select Sprinkler Zone. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Level. under Other.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule.

and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Filter by. select Embedded Schedule. for Filter. select Calculate totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties.27 In the drawing area. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. On the Formatting tab. delete the word Maximum. System Name. click Edit. for Available fields. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click Type. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Grand totals. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Embedded Schedule. 30 Click OK twice. and Count. select Sprinklers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Fields. select Level equals Level 2. Under Field formatting. right-click the schedule. click Edit. select Count. and select Totals only. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . under Other.

Fire Protection Plan Design. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed. 48 In the floor plan. select space 221 Instruction. select space 221 Instruction. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. but their values are not determined. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select Light. 41 In the plan view. double-click FP . under Identity Data. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. 52 Click OK. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. As a result. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). click in the floor plan to make it the active view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. and click OK. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 43 Click Cancel. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 50 Access the instance properties. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

click Training Files. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you place the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. methodology. 279 . you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. At the end of this tutorial. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.autodesk. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. and double-click Level 2 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.rvt. you can choose to save your work. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After finishing each exercise. By following the recommended workflow. As you create the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When there is a small misalignment. After placing the initial sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

10 Press Esc twice. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 206. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and 207. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. select the sprinklers that you placed. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Also. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place 3 sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and 200C). open Design ➤ FP .Design. as shown. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Fire Protection Piping Plan . you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then press Esc. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 200B.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. specify a vertical offset. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Next. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 18 Type WT. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 17 In the Project Browser.

you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).0. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. After creating the logical connection. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and press Enter. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. In the next exercise. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. enter 4100. and with piping (physical connection). and click Element Properties. 25 Click OK. Notice that the schedule updates. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Next. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. under Constraints. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. For Number. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. enter 11. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 29 Press Esc. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.FP_Ceiling view. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This number is determined in the schedule. move the cursor to the right. you adjust the offset. for Offset.19 In the floor plan. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . enter 2900 mm.

However.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Fire Protection Plan . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Unlike logical connections (systems). as shown. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.rvt.Design is highlighted. As you assign sprinklers to systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. click View ➤ Systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and select Piping. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 Right-click the header.

place the cursor over a sprinkler. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. press Tab. indicating the logical connection. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . and click Select. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. named Fire Protection Wet. Next. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 11 With the system still selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and select the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. In the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. select an initial piping layout.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system.

13 In the System Browser. for Diameter. verify that Main is selected. click Place Base. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. for System Name. verify that 2800. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 23 For Offset. 19 Click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. 14 Click Finish Editing System. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 15 In the drawing area. select Branch. The Generate Layout tools are activated. In the left pane. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. as shown. click Solutions. providing system editing tools. enter -3650. enter FP Wet_Zone2.Wet is selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. For Offset.The Edit Piping System panel displays. and number of elements in the system. 12 On the Options Bar. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.0 is specified. select 150 mm. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. When the layout is finished. For Pipe Type. and a piping layout preview displays. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . system equipment.

Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. A (parallel movement control) displays. verify that Network is selected. and green represents branch lines). and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. and select solution 4. Creating a Piping System | 287 . the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 29 Click Finish Layout. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. Either relocate the system components. 32 If necessary. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. as shown.

you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. Next.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and select the elbow fitting as shown. click Training Files. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .33 Close the file with or without saving it. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and then you create piping to physically connect them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Zoom in. indicating that it’s the active view.

5 In the drawing area. click Add To System. radiators. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. you can select the pipe or duct. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 8 In the corridor. air terminals. click Finish Editing System. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 9 On the Edit System panel. mechanical equipment. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and pipe or duct is created.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and so on) are logically connected by a system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).

and select solution 5. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Layout. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and then tile the views. verify that Network is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. for Solution Type.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 18 Click Finish Editing System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor.11 On the Generate Layout panel. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Close the System Browser. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 21 In the Piping Plan. verify that Solutions is selected.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and then press Esc.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. select 2800. right-click. for Offset. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. 29 Using the same method. 28 In the drawing area. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1 : 50. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. for Scale. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. click Training Files. 31 In the plan view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.

double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click.6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and then right-click the top connector. for View Name. and click Draw Pipe. for Sub-Discipline. drag the top section boundary line up. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . Click OK. 15 Press Spacebar. Under Identity Data. enter FP Section_Stair.Design the active view. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 10 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the tee fitting.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Make Level 2 .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. select Design. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and press Enter.Design. For Default View Template.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 22 In the drawing area. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. right-click Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Plan . and then click Modify. enter 2135. select FP .Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 17 Move the cursor up. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select MEP Section. 12 If necessary.

27 On the Placement Tools panel. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). select . zoom to the hose reel cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active. and click Draw Pipe. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 Select the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 26 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify. for Diameter.23 In the section view. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .

34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. and click Open.50 mm is selected. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 32 In the Open dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that M_Gate Valve . as shown. click Yes to load a family.29 Close the section view. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.rvt. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.

starting at the lower left corner of the wing. select 25mm. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. width.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). All selected piping is now 1" diameter. or width. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 7 On the Options Bar. click Check None. 6 In the Filter dialog. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. width. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. and click OK. for Diameter. or height. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. height. 8 Click Modify. Changing the diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 .

10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . By hiding the linked file.rfa. Press Esc. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. NOTE Tags are view specific. Clear Leader. and after each segment highlights. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 12 If necessary. and click Open. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). select the linked architectural file.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 18 In the 3D view. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. click to place the tag. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 17 On the View Control Bar.

select 100mm. and when the section highlights. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. The main piping is selected and displays in red.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 21 On the Options Bar. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . for Diameter. press Tab.

22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. and maximize the floor plan. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 24 In the drawing area. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe diameter is modified. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. for Diameter. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 26 Using the same method. 25 On the Options Bar. select 40mm.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this exercise. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. For additional practice. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . create details.

306 .

and click Properties.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. right-click Copy of Level 1. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click Rename. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. 307 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. dependent views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Floor Plans. and click OK. If the view included detail graphics.rvt. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and view references. In the left pane of the Open dialog. matchlines. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.

and then press Esc. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 4 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. more focused. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Apply Default View Template. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. as shown. views and put them on the sheet. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click Rename. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 10 In the drawing area. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 7 Close the file without saving. to delineate splits in a large floor plan.

and click OK. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select black. select 11. 13 Press Esc twice. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. In the Color dialog. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Double Dash . For Line Pattern. and then press Esc. For Line Weight. Click OK. 19 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click the current value. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

20 Select the upper view reference and. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. for Target view. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . on the Options Bar. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. 21 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. as shown.

Domestic Water. and click Properties. 4 In the Project Browser. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. click Training Files.rvt. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. for View Name. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Plumbing Isometric. For Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 2 Zoom in. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and zoom to each of the view references. and select the section box. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 27 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. right-click 3D Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric .

For Pattern. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select Documentation. For Sub-Discipline. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Domestic Water. and click to select it. Click Apply. and then click OK. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. Click OK. 10 Right-click. right-click Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. select 3. select Dash. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. for View Classification. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select Plumbing. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 15 Right-click. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Sanitary Waste.5mm Arial.16 Press Esc. and in the view properties. specify Plumbing . verify that Common is selected. 19 Using methods learned previously. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and in the Type Selector. and for Default View Template. click on the Format value. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. select 1. For Slope.Isometric.

for Rounding.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it.■ In the Format dialog. 22 Click OK twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. When the view is associated with a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Training Files. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. you use a plan view to create a callout view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. as shown. select To the nearest 10. 26 Press Esc twice. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale. select 1 : 50. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan).

select 5. Click OK. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and select the viewport. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. drag it to the sheet. double-click M601 . using the same method.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 13 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for Line Weight.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. right-click the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Click OK. For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. under Names.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click OK.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.

322 .

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. work with model-based components.rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. and annotation to create a legend. linetypes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. symbols. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. Creating Annotations In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. duct tags. 323 . you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. click Training Files.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 With the text still selected. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Press Esc twice. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and select 1. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Creating Annotations | 325 . verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. and then click Right Straight. a return diffuser.Add leaders 10 Select the text box.

and click OK. clear Leader. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 24 On the Options Bar. for Ducts. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 25 In the drawing area.17 Click Modify. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. and click Open.rfa. click Load. under Category. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. If necessary. as shown.

Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . and then press Esc.

as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 36 Press Esc twice. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar.

Creating Dimensions | 329 .rvt. select the last tag placed. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. not simply an instance property. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 37 In the drawing area. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and all elements of that type are affected. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. for Leader Arrowhead. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and lock lighting fixtures. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. lay out. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. That’s because you changed a type property. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.

10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 14 Using the same method. On the Options Bar. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 13 Press Esc. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. select the dimension line. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. and then select the interior face of the wall. 12 Click EQ. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.

Creating a Legend | 331 . 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. enter 2430.rvt. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.9). the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and offset them from the wall.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. annotation symbols. and press Enter. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linework. 17 Press Esc. and notes. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. click Training Files. Because the dimensions are locked. 20 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Select the dimension value (3376.

enter Diffuser Legend. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Click OK. ■ 9 In the drawing area. For Scale. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 10 Using the same method.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click in the drawing area. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View. select 1 : 50.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . select Floor Plan.200 Neck. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. and select 1. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 333 . and select 1. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.11 Press Esc. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

21 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 24 Select the component’s break line. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 26 Press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Creating a Legend | 335 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 34 Using the method learned previously. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .30 Select Spot Elevation . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

40 Press Esc. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. and select Title w Line .

A detail callout that references another view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . 337 . A drafting view using detail components.rvt. and text.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m.113 East elevation view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. detail groups. click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.

Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and then modify and align the views. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. place Power Riser .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 5 In the drawing area. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 East on the sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 8 Using the same method.

and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Activate View. giving the appearance of a single view. and click OK. 12 Select the Level 1 line. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Deactivate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click. right-click.9 Press Esc. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.

right-click. right-click. In the next exercise. 22 Press Esc. as shown. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the 113 East elevation view. 21 Using the drag control. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you add wiring to the diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Title w Line . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Activate View.

notice that there are no snaps active. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the Line Styles dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Under Modify Subcategories. click New. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. indicating that it’s the active view. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and click OK. and then click OK. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. for Name. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. for Line Weight. verify that Chain is selected. 8 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. as shown. 2 Close the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . enter Electrical Power.rvt. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . expand Lines. In the New Subcategory dialog.113 North view. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. As you draw. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. select 6. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. click Training Files. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset.10 Press Esc. as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. enter 3mm.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 28 Click above the cap. 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. and select 1.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

Using the same method. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. enter 12. Press Esc.0. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click on the length dimension value. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 40 Press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter 7. enter 3. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .

while pressing Ctrl. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 50 With the group selected. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. for Name. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 52 Select the detail group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. enter Ground. and click OK. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. TP-2B. select all 3 lines. 47 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 46 In the Project Browser.

Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In later exercises. and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).

350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. click Training Files. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. 2 Zoom in to view the section. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. click Home. 3 Select the section box. 8 On the ViewCube.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 4 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and then click the corner where the Top. and click OK. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Back. and click Apply View Template.rvt. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and Left sides converge. Walkthroughs. select 3D Views. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 6 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Rename. 5 Right-click the copy. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 7 Right-click the ViewCube.

Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Typical. select 3D HVAC Iso. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and click to specify the second leader point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.■ ■ Under Names. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click OK. Move the cursor down and to the left. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).

type VP to open the instance properties for the view. To rotate and reposition a text label. under Extents. as shown.18 Press Esc. as shown. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and then click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible. 19 Complete the text labels. 23 Click on the crop region. and under Extents.

28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 In the Instance Properties. 33 Right-click the view. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. click Training Files. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties. and under Extents.25 Click OK. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. scroll down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 29 Right click the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Place a detail component. select Crop View and Section Box. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 30 On the View Control Bar.rvt. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. and click Deactivate View. and click OK.

as shown. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Click OK.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). for Sub-Discipline. select 1 : 5. 12 On the Element panel. select Plumbing. 9 Zoom in to the component. Click OK. right-click the view name. For View Classification. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 13 In the drawing area. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. as the rectangle start point. For Scale. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. and click Properties. select Documentation.

21 In the drawing area.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. select C. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.P. 20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. and click OK. for Type. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Concrete. and then press Esc. 18 With the filled region still selected. 22 Click Modify.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.

24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 28 Click Modify. and then click to select them. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 23 In the drawing area.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the filled region. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Multiple. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. (Line). 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 40 Click Finish Region.

Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. draw wide detail lines as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Flashing Membrane_F.D. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Using the method learned previously. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. for Name. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. and then click to select them. 49 Click Modify.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. as shown.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . press Spacebar twice. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 55 Press Esc.

62 Press Esc twice. as shown. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select Leader and Free End. 64 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 67 On the Options Bar.

81 Select the text note. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 72 If necessary.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 80 Press Esc twice. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and then click OK.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . select 15000 (Division 15 . 76 To select the leader start point.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and click to specify the second leader point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 71 Click Modify. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point.

84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail.

select the view title.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and click to place it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice. 88 In the drawing area.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful